user guide 1689

89
 TE365F User Guide ENGLISH

Upload: deadlyblessings

Post on 07-Apr-2018

226 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 189

TE365F User Guide ENGLISH

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 289

Bluetooth QD ID B014200

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 389

LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT

1 WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERSLG offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed subscriber unit and its enclosed accessories will befree from defects in material and workmanship according to the following terms and conditions

1 The limited warranty for the product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the date of purchase of the

product by the original end user2 The limited warranty extends only to the original end user of the product and is not assignable ortransferable to any subsequent purchaserend user

3 This warranty is good only to the original end user of the product during the warranty period as longas it is in Canada

4 Upon request from LG the consumer must provide information to reasonably prove the date of

purchase5 During the applicable warranty period LG will repair or replace at LGrsquos sole option without charge to

the original end user any defective component part of the phone or accessory

6 LG may use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any product or replace aproduct with a rebuilt reconditioned or new product

2 WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER1 Defects or damages resulting from use of the product in other than its normal and customary manner

2 Defects or damages from abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to moisture ordampness unauthorized modifications unauthorized connections unauthorized repair misuse neglectabuse accident alteration improper installation or other acts which are not the fault of LG includingdamage caused by spills of food or liquids

3 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship

4 The fact that the Customer Service Department at LG was not notified by the original end user of thealleged defect or malfunction of the product during the warranty period

5 Products which have had their serial numbers removed or made illegible

6 Damage resulting from use of non-LG approved accessories

7 All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normalcustomer use

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 489

8 Products serviced by non-authorized persons or companies

Notes

1 This limited warranty supersedes all other warranties expressed or implied either in fact or byoperations of law statutory or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for a particular purpose

2 Shipping damage is the sole responsibility of the shipping company

3 EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY

No other express warranty is applicable to this productTHE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OFMARKETABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN LG ELECTRONICSCANADA INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCELOSS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY

INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT

4 HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICETo obtain warranty service please call the following telephone number from anywhere in Canada

LG Electronics Canada Inc

Tel 1-888-542-2623wwwlgca (see links to ldquoWireless Phone Servicerdquo)

Electronics Canada Inc

Mississauga Ontario

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 589

Some o the contents in thismanual may dier rom your phonedepending on the sotware o thephone or your service provider

TE365F User Guide

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689

Contents

Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4

Getting to know yourphone 10

Open view 11

Installing the SIM card andbattery 13

Memory card 17

Your standby screen 19

General Functions 20Making a Call 20

Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21

Entering Text 22

In-Call Menu 25

During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26

Menu Tree 28

Fido Shop 30

Media 31Images 31

Sounds 31

Videos 31

Documents 31

Others 32

External memory 32

GamesampApps 33Games 33

Applications 33

Network prole 33

Call History 34All calls 34

Missed calls 34

Dialled calls 34

Received calls 34

Internet 35

Messages 36

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789

Tools 45MP3 player 45

Camera 49

FM radio 55

Voice recorder 55

Alarm clock 56Calendar 56

Memo 57

Calculator 58

Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59

World clock 59

Contacts 60

Search 60New contact 60

Speed dials 60

Groups 60

Copy all 60

Delete all 61

Settings 61

Inormation 61

Settings 62

Fido IM 71

MobileMail 76

Communities77

PC Sync 78

Accessories 82

Trouble Shooting 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889

LG TE365F | User Guide4

G ui d el i n e s

Please read these simple guidelines

Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal

Exposure to radio frequencyenergy

Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with

applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the

saety o all persons regardless o age and health

bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest

certiied power level in all usedrequency bands

bull While there may be dierences

between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio

wavesbull The highest SAR value or this

model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described

in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada

Body on Operation

This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body

Additionally belt clips holsters amp

other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989

5

G ui d el i n e s

Caution amp Notice

Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions

(1) this device may not causeintererence and

(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice

Product care andmaintenance

WARNING

Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other

types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous

bull Do not disassemble this unit Take

it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required

bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and

personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom

heat sources such as radiators orcookers

bull Do not drop

bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock

bull Switch o the phone in any area

where you are required by special

regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may

aect sensitive medical equipment

bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It

may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone

bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset

can become hot and create a irehazard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189

7

G ui d el i n e s

bull Pull o the road and park beore

making or answering a call i driving conditions so require

bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle

such as car stereos and saetyequipment

bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless

equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance

bull I you are listening to music whilst

out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads

Avoid damage to yourhearing

Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore

recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel

Glass Parts

Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device

is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 289

Bluetooth QD ID B014200

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 389

LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT

1 WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERSLG offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed subscriber unit and its enclosed accessories will befree from defects in material and workmanship according to the following terms and conditions

1 The limited warranty for the product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the date of purchase of the

product by the original end user2 The limited warranty extends only to the original end user of the product and is not assignable ortransferable to any subsequent purchaserend user

3 This warranty is good only to the original end user of the product during the warranty period as longas it is in Canada

4 Upon request from LG the consumer must provide information to reasonably prove the date of

purchase5 During the applicable warranty period LG will repair or replace at LGrsquos sole option without charge to

the original end user any defective component part of the phone or accessory

6 LG may use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any product or replace aproduct with a rebuilt reconditioned or new product

2 WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER1 Defects or damages resulting from use of the product in other than its normal and customary manner

2 Defects or damages from abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to moisture ordampness unauthorized modifications unauthorized connections unauthorized repair misuse neglectabuse accident alteration improper installation or other acts which are not the fault of LG includingdamage caused by spills of food or liquids

3 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship

4 The fact that the Customer Service Department at LG was not notified by the original end user of thealleged defect or malfunction of the product during the warranty period

5 Products which have had their serial numbers removed or made illegible

6 Damage resulting from use of non-LG approved accessories

7 All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normalcustomer use

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 489

8 Products serviced by non-authorized persons or companies

Notes

1 This limited warranty supersedes all other warranties expressed or implied either in fact or byoperations of law statutory or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for a particular purpose

2 Shipping damage is the sole responsibility of the shipping company

3 EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY

No other express warranty is applicable to this productTHE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OFMARKETABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN LG ELECTRONICSCANADA INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCELOSS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY

INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT

4 HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICETo obtain warranty service please call the following telephone number from anywhere in Canada

LG Electronics Canada Inc

Tel 1-888-542-2623wwwlgca (see links to ldquoWireless Phone Servicerdquo)

Electronics Canada Inc

Mississauga Ontario

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 589

Some o the contents in thismanual may dier rom your phonedepending on the sotware o thephone or your service provider

TE365F User Guide

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689

Contents

Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4

Getting to know yourphone 10

Open view 11

Installing the SIM card andbattery 13

Memory card 17

Your standby screen 19

General Functions 20Making a Call 20

Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21

Entering Text 22

In-Call Menu 25

During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26

Menu Tree 28

Fido Shop 30

Media 31Images 31

Sounds 31

Videos 31

Documents 31

Others 32

External memory 32

GamesampApps 33Games 33

Applications 33

Network prole 33

Call History 34All calls 34

Missed calls 34

Dialled calls 34

Received calls 34

Internet 35

Messages 36

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789

Tools 45MP3 player 45

Camera 49

FM radio 55

Voice recorder 55

Alarm clock 56Calendar 56

Memo 57

Calculator 58

Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59

World clock 59

Contacts 60

Search 60New contact 60

Speed dials 60

Groups 60

Copy all 60

Delete all 61

Settings 61

Inormation 61

Settings 62

Fido IM 71

MobileMail 76

Communities77

PC Sync 78

Accessories 82

Trouble Shooting 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889

LG TE365F | User Guide4

G ui d el i n e s

Please read these simple guidelines

Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal

Exposure to radio frequencyenergy

Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with

applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the

saety o all persons regardless o age and health

bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest

certiied power level in all usedrequency bands

bull While there may be dierences

between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio

wavesbull The highest SAR value or this

model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described

in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada

Body on Operation

This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body

Additionally belt clips holsters amp

other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989

5

G ui d el i n e s

Caution amp Notice

Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions

(1) this device may not causeintererence and

(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice

Product care andmaintenance

WARNING

Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other

types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous

bull Do not disassemble this unit Take

it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required

bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and

personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom

heat sources such as radiators orcookers

bull Do not drop

bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock

bull Switch o the phone in any area

where you are required by special

regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may

aect sensitive medical equipment

bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It

may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone

bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset

can become hot and create a irehazard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189

7

G ui d el i n e s

bull Pull o the road and park beore

making or answering a call i driving conditions so require

bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle

such as car stereos and saetyequipment

bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless

equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance

bull I you are listening to music whilst

out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads

Avoid damage to yourhearing

Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore

recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel

Glass Parts

Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device

is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 389

LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT

1 WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERSLG offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed subscriber unit and its enclosed accessories will befree from defects in material and workmanship according to the following terms and conditions

1 The limited warranty for the product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the date of purchase of the

product by the original end user2 The limited warranty extends only to the original end user of the product and is not assignable ortransferable to any subsequent purchaserend user

3 This warranty is good only to the original end user of the product during the warranty period as longas it is in Canada

4 Upon request from LG the consumer must provide information to reasonably prove the date of

purchase5 During the applicable warranty period LG will repair or replace at LGrsquos sole option without charge to

the original end user any defective component part of the phone or accessory

6 LG may use rebuilt reconditioned or new parts or components when repairing any product or replace aproduct with a rebuilt reconditioned or new product

2 WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER1 Defects or damages resulting from use of the product in other than its normal and customary manner

2 Defects or damages from abnormal use abnormal conditions improper storage exposure to moisture ordampness unauthorized modifications unauthorized connections unauthorized repair misuse neglectabuse accident alteration improper installation or other acts which are not the fault of LG includingdamage caused by spills of food or liquids

3 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship

4 The fact that the Customer Service Department at LG was not notified by the original end user of thealleged defect or malfunction of the product during the warranty period

5 Products which have had their serial numbers removed or made illegible

6 Damage resulting from use of non-LG approved accessories

7 All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normalcustomer use

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 489

8 Products serviced by non-authorized persons or companies

Notes

1 This limited warranty supersedes all other warranties expressed or implied either in fact or byoperations of law statutory or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for a particular purpose

2 Shipping damage is the sole responsibility of the shipping company

3 EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY

No other express warranty is applicable to this productTHE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OFMARKETABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN LG ELECTRONICSCANADA INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCELOSS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY

INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT

4 HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICETo obtain warranty service please call the following telephone number from anywhere in Canada

LG Electronics Canada Inc

Tel 1-888-542-2623wwwlgca (see links to ldquoWireless Phone Servicerdquo)

Electronics Canada Inc

Mississauga Ontario

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 589

Some o the contents in thismanual may dier rom your phonedepending on the sotware o thephone or your service provider

TE365F User Guide

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689

Contents

Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4

Getting to know yourphone 10

Open view 11

Installing the SIM card andbattery 13

Memory card 17

Your standby screen 19

General Functions 20Making a Call 20

Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21

Entering Text 22

In-Call Menu 25

During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26

Menu Tree 28

Fido Shop 30

Media 31Images 31

Sounds 31

Videos 31

Documents 31

Others 32

External memory 32

GamesampApps 33Games 33

Applications 33

Network prole 33

Call History 34All calls 34

Missed calls 34

Dialled calls 34

Received calls 34

Internet 35

Messages 36

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789

Tools 45MP3 player 45

Camera 49

FM radio 55

Voice recorder 55

Alarm clock 56Calendar 56

Memo 57

Calculator 58

Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59

World clock 59

Contacts 60

Search 60New contact 60

Speed dials 60

Groups 60

Copy all 60

Delete all 61

Settings 61

Inormation 61

Settings 62

Fido IM 71

MobileMail 76

Communities77

PC Sync 78

Accessories 82

Trouble Shooting 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889

LG TE365F | User Guide4

G ui d el i n e s

Please read these simple guidelines

Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal

Exposure to radio frequencyenergy

Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with

applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the

saety o all persons regardless o age and health

bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest

certiied power level in all usedrequency bands

bull While there may be dierences

between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio

wavesbull The highest SAR value or this

model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described

in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada

Body on Operation

This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body

Additionally belt clips holsters amp

other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989

5

G ui d el i n e s

Caution amp Notice

Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions

(1) this device may not causeintererence and

(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice

Product care andmaintenance

WARNING

Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other

types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous

bull Do not disassemble this unit Take

it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required

bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and

personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom

heat sources such as radiators orcookers

bull Do not drop

bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock

bull Switch o the phone in any area

where you are required by special

regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may

aect sensitive medical equipment

bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It

may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone

bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset

can become hot and create a irehazard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189

7

G ui d el i n e s

bull Pull o the road and park beore

making or answering a call i driving conditions so require

bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle

such as car stereos and saetyequipment

bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless

equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance

bull I you are listening to music whilst

out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads

Avoid damage to yourhearing

Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore

recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel

Glass Parts

Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device

is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 489

8 Products serviced by non-authorized persons or companies

Notes

1 This limited warranty supersedes all other warranties expressed or implied either in fact or byoperations of law statutory or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for a particular purpose

2 Shipping damage is the sole responsibility of the shipping company

3 EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY

No other express warranty is applicable to this productTHE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OFMARKETABILITY IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN LG ELECTRONICSCANADA INC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT INCONVENIENCELOSS OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY

INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT

4 HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICETo obtain warranty service please call the following telephone number from anywhere in Canada

LG Electronics Canada Inc

Tel 1-888-542-2623wwwlgca (see links to ldquoWireless Phone Servicerdquo)

Electronics Canada Inc

Mississauga Ontario

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 589

Some o the contents in thismanual may dier rom your phonedepending on the sotware o thephone or your service provider

TE365F User Guide

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689

Contents

Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4

Getting to know yourphone 10

Open view 11

Installing the SIM card andbattery 13

Memory card 17

Your standby screen 19

General Functions 20Making a Call 20

Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21

Entering Text 22

In-Call Menu 25

During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26

Menu Tree 28

Fido Shop 30

Media 31Images 31

Sounds 31

Videos 31

Documents 31

Others 32

External memory 32

GamesampApps 33Games 33

Applications 33

Network prole 33

Call History 34All calls 34

Missed calls 34

Dialled calls 34

Received calls 34

Internet 35

Messages 36

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789

Tools 45MP3 player 45

Camera 49

FM radio 55

Voice recorder 55

Alarm clock 56Calendar 56

Memo 57

Calculator 58

Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59

World clock 59

Contacts 60

Search 60New contact 60

Speed dials 60

Groups 60

Copy all 60

Delete all 61

Settings 61

Inormation 61

Settings 62

Fido IM 71

MobileMail 76

Communities77

PC Sync 78

Accessories 82

Trouble Shooting 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889

LG TE365F | User Guide4

G ui d el i n e s

Please read these simple guidelines

Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal

Exposure to radio frequencyenergy

Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with

applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the

saety o all persons regardless o age and health

bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest

certiied power level in all usedrequency bands

bull While there may be dierences

between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio

wavesbull The highest SAR value or this

model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described

in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada

Body on Operation

This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body

Additionally belt clips holsters amp

other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989

5

G ui d el i n e s

Caution amp Notice

Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions

(1) this device may not causeintererence and

(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice

Product care andmaintenance

WARNING

Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other

types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous

bull Do not disassemble this unit Take

it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required

bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and

personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom

heat sources such as radiators orcookers

bull Do not drop

bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock

bull Switch o the phone in any area

where you are required by special

regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may

aect sensitive medical equipment

bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It

may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone

bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset

can become hot and create a irehazard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189

7

G ui d el i n e s

bull Pull o the road and park beore

making or answering a call i driving conditions so require

bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle

such as car stereos and saetyequipment

bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless

equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance

bull I you are listening to music whilst

out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads

Avoid damage to yourhearing

Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore

recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel

Glass Parts

Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device

is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 589

Some o the contents in thismanual may dier rom your phonedepending on the sotware o thephone or your service provider

TE365F User Guide

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689

Contents

Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4

Getting to know yourphone 10

Open view 11

Installing the SIM card andbattery 13

Memory card 17

Your standby screen 19

General Functions 20Making a Call 20

Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21

Entering Text 22

In-Call Menu 25

During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26

Menu Tree 28

Fido Shop 30

Media 31Images 31

Sounds 31

Videos 31

Documents 31

Others 32

External memory 32

GamesampApps 33Games 33

Applications 33

Network prole 33

Call History 34All calls 34

Missed calls 34

Dialled calls 34

Received calls 34

Internet 35

Messages 36

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789

Tools 45MP3 player 45

Camera 49

FM radio 55

Voice recorder 55

Alarm clock 56Calendar 56

Memo 57

Calculator 58

Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59

World clock 59

Contacts 60

Search 60New contact 60

Speed dials 60

Groups 60

Copy all 60

Delete all 61

Settings 61

Inormation 61

Settings 62

Fido IM 71

MobileMail 76

Communities77

PC Sync 78

Accessories 82

Trouble Shooting 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889

LG TE365F | User Guide4

G ui d el i n e s

Please read these simple guidelines

Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal

Exposure to radio frequencyenergy

Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with

applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the

saety o all persons regardless o age and health

bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest

certiied power level in all usedrequency bands

bull While there may be dierences

between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio

wavesbull The highest SAR value or this

model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described

in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada

Body on Operation

This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body

Additionally belt clips holsters amp

other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989

5

G ui d el i n e s

Caution amp Notice

Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions

(1) this device may not causeintererence and

(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice

Product care andmaintenance

WARNING

Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other

types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous

bull Do not disassemble this unit Take

it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required

bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and

personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom

heat sources such as radiators orcookers

bull Do not drop

bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock

bull Switch o the phone in any area

where you are required by special

regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may

aect sensitive medical equipment

bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It

may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone

bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset

can become hot and create a irehazard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189

7

G ui d el i n e s

bull Pull o the road and park beore

making or answering a call i driving conditions so require

bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle

such as car stereos and saetyequipment

bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless

equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance

bull I you are listening to music whilst

out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads

Avoid damage to yourhearing

Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore

recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel

Glass Parts

Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device

is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 689

Contents

Guidelines or sae andef cient use 4

Getting to know yourphone 10

Open view 11

Installing the SIM card andbattery 13

Memory card 17

Your standby screen 19

General Functions 20Making a Call 20

Adjusting the Volume 21Answering a Call 21

Entering Text 22

In-Call Menu 25

During a Call 25Conerence Calls 26

Menu Tree 28

Fido Shop 30

Media 31Images 31

Sounds 31

Videos 31

Documents 31

Others 32

External memory 32

GamesampApps 33Games 33

Applications 33

Network prole 33

Call History 34All calls 34

Missed calls 34

Dialled calls 34

Received calls 34

Internet 35

Messages 36

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789

Tools 45MP3 player 45

Camera 49

FM radio 55

Voice recorder 55

Alarm clock 56Calendar 56

Memo 57

Calculator 58

Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59

World clock 59

Contacts 60

Search 60New contact 60

Speed dials 60

Groups 60

Copy all 60

Delete all 61

Settings 61

Inormation 61

Settings 62

Fido IM 71

MobileMail 76

Communities77

PC Sync 78

Accessories 82

Trouble Shooting 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889

LG TE365F | User Guide4

G ui d el i n e s

Please read these simple guidelines

Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal

Exposure to radio frequencyenergy

Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with

applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the

saety o all persons regardless o age and health

bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest

certiied power level in all usedrequency bands

bull While there may be dierences

between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio

wavesbull The highest SAR value or this

model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described

in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada

Body on Operation

This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body

Additionally belt clips holsters amp

other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989

5

G ui d el i n e s

Caution amp Notice

Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions

(1) this device may not causeintererence and

(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice

Product care andmaintenance

WARNING

Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other

types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous

bull Do not disassemble this unit Take

it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required

bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and

personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom

heat sources such as radiators orcookers

bull Do not drop

bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock

bull Switch o the phone in any area

where you are required by special

regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may

aect sensitive medical equipment

bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It

may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone

bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset

can become hot and create a irehazard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189

7

G ui d el i n e s

bull Pull o the road and park beore

making or answering a call i driving conditions so require

bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle

such as car stereos and saetyequipment

bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless

equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance

bull I you are listening to music whilst

out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads

Avoid damage to yourhearing

Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore

recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel

Glass Parts

Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device

is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 789

Tools 45MP3 player 45

Camera 49

FM radio 55

Voice recorder 55

Alarm clock 56Calendar 56

Memo 57

Calculator 58

Stopwatch 58Unit converter 59

World clock 59

Contacts 60

Search 60New contact 60

Speed dials 60

Groups 60

Copy all 60

Delete all 61

Settings 61

Inormation 61

Settings 62

Fido IM 71

MobileMail 76

Communities77

PC Sync 78

Accessories 82

Trouble Shooting 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889

LG TE365F | User Guide4

G ui d el i n e s

Please read these simple guidelines

Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal

Exposure to radio frequencyenergy

Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with

applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the

saety o all persons regardless o age and health

bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest

certiied power level in all usedrequency bands

bull While there may be dierences

between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio

wavesbull The highest SAR value or this

model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described

in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada

Body on Operation

This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body

Additionally belt clips holsters amp

other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989

5

G ui d el i n e s

Caution amp Notice

Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions

(1) this device may not causeintererence and

(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice

Product care andmaintenance

WARNING

Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other

types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous

bull Do not disassemble this unit Take

it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required

bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and

personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom

heat sources such as radiators orcookers

bull Do not drop

bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock

bull Switch o the phone in any area

where you are required by special

regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may

aect sensitive medical equipment

bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It

may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone

bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset

can become hot and create a irehazard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189

7

G ui d el i n e s

bull Pull o the road and park beore

making or answering a call i driving conditions so require

bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle

such as car stereos and saetyequipment

bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless

equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance

bull I you are listening to music whilst

out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads

Avoid damage to yourhearing

Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore

recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel

Glass Parts

Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device

is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 889

LG TE365F | User Guide4

G ui d el i n e s

Please read these simple guidelines

Not ollowing these guidelines maybe dangerous or illegal

Exposure to radio frequencyenergy

Radio wave exposure and SpeciicAbsorption Rate (SAR) inormationThis mobile phone model TE365Fhas been designed to comply with

applicable saety requirements orexposure to radio waves Theserequirements are based on scientiicguidelines that include saetymargins designed to assure the

saety o all persons regardless o age and health

bull The radio wave exposureguidelines employ a unit o measurement known as theSpeciic Absorption Rate or SARTests or SAR are conducted usingstandardised methods with thephone transmitting at its highest

certiied power level in all usedrequency bands

bull While there may be dierences

between the SAR levels o variousLG phone models they are alldesigned to meet the relevantguidelines or exposure to radio

wavesbull The highest SAR value or this

model phone when tested or useat the ear is 0998 Wkg and whenworn on the body as described

in this users manual is 12 WkgThe limit is 16 Wkg(1g) or USA ampCanada

Body on Operation

This Device has been tested ortypical body-worn operations withthe distance o 079 inches(20cm)rom the userrsquos body To complywith FCC RF exposure requirementsa minimum separation distanceo 079 inches(20cm) must bemaintained rom the users body

Additionally belt clips holsters amp

other body-worn accessories maynot contain metallic components

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989

5

G ui d el i n e s

Caution amp Notice

Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions

(1) this device may not causeintererence and

(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice

Product care andmaintenance

WARNING

Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other

types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous

bull Do not disassemble this unit Take

it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required

bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and

personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom

heat sources such as radiators orcookers

bull Do not drop

bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock

bull Switch o the phone in any area

where you are required by special

regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may

aect sensitive medical equipment

bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It

may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone

bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset

can become hot and create a irehazard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189

7

G ui d el i n e s

bull Pull o the road and park beore

making or answering a call i driving conditions so require

bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle

such as car stereos and saetyequipment

bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless

equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance

bull I you are listening to music whilst

out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads

Avoid damage to yourhearing

Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore

recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel

Glass Parts

Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device

is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 989

5

G ui d el i n e s

Caution amp Notice

Operation is subject to the ollowingtwo conditions

(1) this device may not causeintererence and

(2) this device must acceptany intererence includingintererence that may causeundesired operation o thedevice

Product care andmaintenance

WARNING

Only use batteries chargersand accessories approved oruse with this particular phonemodel The use o any other

types may invalidate anyapproval or warranty applyingto the phone and may bedangerous

bull Do not disassemble this unit Take

it to a qualiied service technicianwhen repair work is required

bull Keep away rom electricalappliances such as TVs radios and

personal computersbull The unit should be kept away rom

heat sources such as radiators orcookers

bull Do not drop

bull Do not subject this unit tomechanical vibration or shock

bull Switch o the phone in any area

where you are required by special

regulations For example do not useyour phone in hospitals as it may

aect sensitive medical equipment

bull Do not handle the phone with wethands while it is being charged It

may cause an electric shock andcan seriously damage your phone

bull Do not to charge a handset nearlammable material as the handset

can become hot and create a irehazard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189

7

G ui d el i n e s

bull Pull o the road and park beore

making or answering a call i driving conditions so require

bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle

such as car stereos and saetyequipment

bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless

equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance

bull I you are listening to music whilst

out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads

Avoid damage to yourhearing

Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore

recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel

Glass Parts

Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device

is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1089

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189

7

G ui d el i n e s

bull Pull o the road and park beore

making or answering a call i driving conditions so require

bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle

such as car stereos and saetyequipment

bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless

equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance

bull I you are listening to music whilst

out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads

Avoid damage to yourhearing

Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore

recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel

Glass Parts

Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device

is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1189

7

G ui d el i n e s

bull Pull o the road and park beore

making or answering a call i driving conditions so require

bull RF energy may aect someelectronic systems in your vehicle

such as car stereos and saetyequipment

bull When your vehicle is equippedwith an air bag do not obstructwith installed or portable wireless

equipment It can cause the air bagto ail or cause serious injury dueto improper perormance

bull I you are listening to music whilst

out and about please ensure thatthe volume is at a reasonablelevel so that you are aware o yoursurroundings This is particularlyimperative when near roads

Avoid damage to yourhearing

Damage to your hearing can occuri you are exposed to loud sound orlong periods o time We thereore

recommend that you do not turn onor o the handset close to your earWe also recommend that music andcall volumes are set to a reasonablelevel

Glass Parts

Some parts o your mobile deviceare made o glass This glasscould break i your mobile device

is dropped on a hard surace orreceives a substantial impact I the glass breaks do not touch orattempt to remove Stop using yourmobile device until the glass isreplaced by an authorized serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1289

LG TE365F | User Guide8

Guidelines or sae and ef cient use

G ui d el i n e s

Blasting area

Do not use the phone whereblasting is in progress Observerestrictions and ollow anyregulations or rules

Potentially explosiveatmospheres

bull Do not use the phone at areueling point

bull Do not use near uel or chemicalsbull Do not transport or store

lammable gas liquid orexplosives in the samecompartment o your vehicleas your mobile phone andaccessories

In aircraft

Wireless devices can causeintererence in aircrat

bull Turn your mobile phone o beoreboarding any aircrat

bull Do not use it on the groundwithout permission rom the crew

Children

Keep the phone in a sae place

out o the reach o small childrenIt includes small parts which maycause a choking hazard i detached

Emergency calls

Emergency calls may not beavailable under all mobile networksThereore you should never dependsolely on the phone or emergency

calls Check with your local serviceprovider

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1389

9

G ui d el i n e s

Battery information and care

bull You do not need to completelydischarge the battery beorerecharging Unlike other batterysystems there is no memory

eect that could compromise thebatteryrsquos perormance

bull Use only LG batteries and chargersLG chargers are designed tomaximize the battery lie

bull Do not disassemble or short-circuitthe battery pack

bull Keep the metal contacts o thebattery pack clean

bull Replace the battery when itno longer provides acceptableperormance The battery pack maybe recharged hundreds o times until it needs replacing

bull Recharge the battery i it hasnot been used or a long time tomaximize usability

bull Do not expose the battery charger

to direct sunlight or use it in highhumidity such as in the bathroom

bull Do not leave the battery in hot orcold places this may deteriorate

the battery perormancebull There is risk o explosion i the

battery is replaced by an incorrecttype

bull Dispose o used batteries

according to the manuacturerrsquosinstructions Please recycle whenpossible Do not dispose ashousehold waste

bull I you need to replace the batterytake it to the nearest authorized LGElectronics service point or dealeror assistance

bull Always unplug the charger rom

the wall socket ater the phone isully charged to save unnecessarypower consumption o thecharger

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1489

LG TE365F | User Guide10

Getting to know your phone

Main screen

OK key

Left soft key

Go to the Emaildirectly

Call keyDials a phonenumber and

answersincoming calls

Touchpad keyActivate the touch dialscreen by pressing the key

Navigation keysbull In standby mode

Up BrowserDown Contacts SearchRight New messages

Let All callsbull In menu Navigates between menus

Right soft keyGo to the Shortcut directly

EndPower keyEnds or rejects a call Turns the phone ono Returns to the standby screen whenyou use the menu

Clear key

Deletes a character with each press Usethis key to go back to the previous screen

Volume key

bull In standby mode Controls the ring volumebull During a call Controls the receiver volume

when it sets as General mode

Camera

Chargercablehandsfreeconnector

Memorycard slot

G e t t i n g t ok

n ow

y o ur ph on

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1589

11

Open view

Left soft keyRight soft key

Perorms the unction indicated at thebottom o the displayLet sot key Go to the Email directlyRight sot key Go to the Shortcut directly

Fn keyChange romtext modeto symbolnumeric modeand lock

keypadSymbol keyEnters symboliccharacter

Change the text mode

(Capital Small)

Alpha numeric keys

Space KeyUse to enter space

while editingEnter key

OK keySelects menu optionsand conirms actions

Clear keybull Clears a

character witheach press

Hold the keydown to clearall inputs

bull Use this keyto go back to a previous

screen

Messagekey

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1689

LG TE365F | User Guide12

Open view

Battery coverBattery coverrelease latch

Memory card slot

Camera lens

Battery

Mirror

O p envi e

w

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1789

13

Installing the SIM card and battery

1 Remove the battery cover

Press the battery cover releaselatch The battery cover should lito easily

2 Remove the battery

Lever the bottom edge o thebattery and remove it careullyrom the battery compartment

WARNING Do not removethe battery when the phoneis switched on as this may

damage the phone

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1889

LG TE365F | User Guide14

3 Install the SIM card

Slide the SIM card into the SIMcard holder Make sure that thegold contact area on the card isacing downwards To remove the

SIM card push it out o the holderrom the top

WARNING Do not insertthe SIM card when the keyboardis open as this may damageyour phone and SIM card

Installing the SIM card and battery

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 1989

15

4 Install the battery

Insert the top o the battery irstinto the top edge o the batterycompartment Ensure the batterycontacts align with the terminals

on the phone Press the bottomo the battery down until it clipsinto place

5 Replace the battery cover

Insert the bottom o the batterycover and push down until itclicks into place

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2089

LG TE365F | User Guide16

Installing the SIM card and battery

6 Charging your phone

Pull open the cover o the chargersocket on the side o your TE365FInsert the charger and plug intoa mains electricity socket Your

TE365F will need to be chargeduntil a message reading FullyCharged appears on screen

WARNING Do not chargethe phone when it is on soturnishings The phone shouldbe charged in a well ventilatedarea

I n s

t a l l i n g t h e S I M c a r d a n d b a t t er

y

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2189

17

Memory card

Installing a memory card

You can expand the memory spaceavailable on your phone using amemory card

TIP A memory card is an

optional accessory

Open the memory card slot Slidethe memory card into the slot cover

until it clicks into place Make surethat the gold contact area is acingdownwards

Removing a memory card

Open the cover and careullyremove the memory card by gentlypushing it in to the phone andquickly releasing it as shown in the

ollowing diagram

M em or y c a r d

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2289

LG TE365F | User Guide18

Memory card

Formatting a memory card

I your memory card is not alreadyormatted you will need to do sobeore you can begin using it

1 From the standby screen press

and select Settings2 Choose Memory status and

select External memory

3 Press Format and enter thepassword which is set to 0000

as deault Your card will beormatted and ready to use

4 To view the new ormatted olderson your TE365F press and

select Media Choose Externalmemory

WARNING When youormat your memory card all

the content will be wiped I youdo not want to lose the dataon your memory card back itup irst

M em or y c a r

d

Y db

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2389

19

Your standby screen

Y o u

r s t a n d b y s c r e e

n

The status bar

The status bar uses various icons toindicate things like signal strengthnew messages and battery lie aswell as telling you whether your

Bluetooth is activeBelow is a table explaining themeaning o icons yoursquore likely to seein the status bar

ICON DESCRIPTION

Network signal strength(number o bars will vary)

No network signal

Roaming service

WAP service is connected

An alarm is set

New message

New voice message

General proile in use

Silent proile in use

Vibrate proile in use

Outdoor proile in useHeadset proile in use

Remaining battery lie

Battery empty

Schedule is onExternal memory

G l F i

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2489

LG TE365F | User Guide20

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

Without sliding your phone you

can dial by pressing touch dialkeypad button

Making a Call

1 Make sure your phone is powered

on

2 Enter a phone number includingthe area code To edit a numberon the display screen simply

press the key to erase onedigit at a time- Press and hold the key to

erase the entire number

3 Press the [SEND] key to call the

number4 When inished press the [END]

key

Making a Call with the Send Key

1 Press the [SEND] key and themost recent incoming outgoingand missed phone numbers willbe displayed

2 Select the desired number byusing the navigation touch pad

3 Press the [SEND] key

Making International Calls

1 Press and hold the key andthe international access characterlsquo+rsquo will appear

2 Enter the country code area codeand the phone number

3 Press the [SEND] key

Ending a Call

When you have inished a call pressthe [END] key

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2589

21

Making a Call from the Contacts

You can store requently callednames and phone numbers in theSIM card as well as in the phonememory known as the Contacts

You can dial a number by simplyselecting a name in the contactsand pressing the [SEND] key

Adjusting the Volume

During a call i you want to adjustthe earpiece volume use the sidevolume keys o the phone

In idle mode you can adjust the ringvolume using the side volume keys

Answering a Call

When you receive a call the phonerings and the phone icon appearson the screen I the caller canbe identiied the callerrsquos phone

number (or name i stored in yourAddress Book) is displayed

1 Press the [SEND] key orthe let sot key to answer anincoming call I Any Key has

been set as the Answer Mode(Menu gt 9 gt 5 gt 4gt 2) any keypress will answer a call except orthe [END] key or the right sotkey

2 End the call by pressing the[END] key

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General F nctions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2689

LG TE365F | User Guide22

Note You can answer a call while

using the Address Book or othermenu eatures

Vibrating Mode (Quick)

Vibrating Mode can be activated

by pressing and holding down thekey

Signal Strength

I you are inside a building being

near a window may give you betterreception You can see the strengtho your signal by the signal indicatoron your phonersquos display screen

Entering Text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters by using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin the Address Book writing a

message or scheduling events inthe calendar all require text to beentered

The ollowing text input modes areavailable on the phone

Changing the Text Input Mode

Change the text input mode bypressing

You can check the current text input

mode in the upper right corner o the screen

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2789

23

ABC Mode

This mode allows you to enterletters by pressing the key labeledwith the required letter once twicethree or our times until the letter is

displayed123 Mode (Numbers Mode)

Type numbers using one keystrokeper number To change to 123 modein a text entry ield press thekey until 123 mode is displayed inthe upper right corner

Symbol Mode

The Symbol Mode enables you toenter various symbols or specialcharacters

To delete letters press Press and hold down to

continuously erase the letters

Note Pressing the [END] key will

save your unsaved message in theDrats older

Using the ABC Mode

Use the keypad keys to enter your

text

1 Press the key labeled with therequired letter

- When slide open one press is

one letter2 To insert a space press the

key once To delete letters pressthe key Press and hold downthe key to continuously erase

the letters

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

General Functions

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2889

LG TE365F | User Guide24

Note Reer to the table below or

more inormation on the charactersavailable using the keys

Using the 123 (Numbers) Mode

The 123 Mode enables you to

enter numbers in a text message(a telephone number or example)more quickly Press the keyscorresponding to the required digitsbeore manually switching back to

the appropriate text entry mode

General Functions

G en er a l F un c t i on

s

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 2989

25

In-Call Menu

Your phone provides a number

o control unctions that you canuse during a call To access theseunctions during a call press the letsot key [Options]

During a CallThe menu displayed on the handsetscreen during a call is dierent romthe deault main menu displayedwhen in the idle screen and theseoptions are described below

Making a Second Call

You can select a number you wishto dial rom the Contacts to makea second call Press the Let sot keythen select Contacts Then you canpress SEND key to make a secondcall

Swapping Between Two Calls

By using one o two methods youcan switch between two calls

1 Press the [SEND] key

2 Press the let sot key and then

select Swap

Answering an Incoming Call

To answer an incoming call whenthe handset is ringing simply

press the [SEND] key Thehandset is also able to warn youo an incoming call while you arealready on a call A tone sound inthe earpiece and the display will

show that a second call is waitingThis eature known as Call Waitingis only available i your network supports it

I Call Waiting is turned on you canput the irst call on hold and answerthe second call by pressing the[SEND] key

I n- C a l l M en

u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3089

LG TE365F | User Guide26

Rejecting an Incoming Call

You can reject an incoming callwithout answering by simplypressing the [END] key

Muting the Microphone

You can mute the microphoneduring a call by pressing the rightsot key [Mute] The handset can beunmuted by pressing the right sotkey [Unmute] When the handset ismuted the caller cannot hear youbut you can still hear the caller

Using the Speakerphone

You can use the integratedSpeakerphone during a callby pressing the OK key Theloudspeaker is automaticallydeactivated when you end the call

WARNING Due to increasedvolume levels do not place thephone near your ear while thespeakerphone is enabled

Conference Calls

The conerence service providesyou with the ability to havea simultaneous conversationwith more than one caller The

conerence call eature can be usedonly i your network service providersupports this eature

A conerence call can only be setup when you have one call active

and one call on hold meaning bothcalls must have been answeredOnce a conerence call is set upcalls may be added disconnected orseparated (that is removed rom the

conerence call but still connectedto you) by the person who set upthe conerence call These optionsare all available rom the In-Callmenu

The maximum number o callers in aconerence call is ive Once startedyou are in control o the conerencecall and only you can add calls to

the conerence call

I n- C a l l M en u

In-Call Menu

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3189

27

Making a Second Call

You can make a second call whilecurrently on a call simply byentering the second number andpressing the [SEND] key Whenthe second call is connected theirst call is automatically placed onhold You can swap calls by pressingthe [SEND] key

Setting Up a Conference Call

To set up a conerence call placeone call on hold then conerence inthe second active call by pressingthe let sot key [Options] and select

the Join Calls sub menu option romthe Conerence Call menu

Activate the Conference Call onHold

To activate a conerence call onhold press the [SEND] key

Adding Calls to the Conference

CallTo add a call to an existingconerence call press the let sotkey and then select the Join Callssub menu rom the Conerence Calloption

Private Call in a Conference Call

To have a private call with one callerrom a conerence call press thelet sot key and select Private Callrom the Conerence Call optionWhen the numbers o the callers aredisplayed select the one you wish

to speak in private withEnding a Conference Call

The currently active conerence callcan be disconnected by pressing

the [END] key I n- C a l l M en u

Menu Tree

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3289

LG TE365F | User Guide28

Menu Tree

1 Fido Shop

2 Media21 Images

22 Sounds

23 Videos

24 Documents

25 Others

26 External memory

3 GamesampApps31 Games

32 Applications

33 Network profile

4 Call History41 All calls

42 Missed calls

43 Dialled calls

44 Received calls

5 Internet

51 Home

52 Yahoo oneSearch

53 Bookmarks

54 Enter address

55 History56 Settings

57 Information

6 Messages

61 New message62 Inbox

63 Drafts

64 Outbox

65 Sent66 Listen to voicemail

67 Info messages

68 Templates

69 Settings

M en uT r e

e

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3389

29

7 Tools

71 MP3 player

72 Camera

73 FM radio

74 Voice recorder

75 Alarm clock 76 Calendar

77 Memo

78 Calculator

79 Stopwatch

70 Unit converter

7 World clock

8 Contacts

81 Search82 New contact

83 Speed dials

84 Groups

85 Copy all

86 Delete all

87 Settings

88 Information

9 Settings

91 Profiles

92 DateampTime

93 Languages

94 Display

95 Call96 Connectivity

97 Security

98 Flight mode

99 Power save

90 Reset

9 Memory status

9 Phone Information

Fido IM1 Windows Live

2 Yahoo Messenger

0 MobileMail

CommunitiesM en uT r e e

Fido Shop

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3489

LG TE365F | User Guide30

do S op

F i d o S h o p

Fido Shop provides access to buy

Ring Tunes Games and other stusor your phone that Fido oer Italso provides quick access to manycommunity sites like Facebook andMore or sur the internet right rom

your phone

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3589

31

M e d i a

Images Menu 21

Get New Graphics This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos graphicdownload site This allows users todownload the various graphics byconnecting to the Internet

Default images You can see thegraphic iles on your phone

Default flash files You can seelash graphic iles on your phone

Sounds Menu 22

Get New Ringtones This menuoption connects to Rogerrsquos ringtonedownload site

Default sounds You can view theaudio sounds on your phone

Videos Menu 23

Get New Videos This menu optionconnects to Rogerrsquos video downloadsite This allows users to downloadthe various videos by connecting tothe Internet

Documents Menu 24

This menu enables you to viewdocument iles

Media

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3689

LG TE365F | User Guide32

Others Menu 25

When you receive iles o anundeined ormat (such as vcs vcetc) via email and via Bluetooth theiles are saved in this older

The ollowing [Options] areavailable

Send via Allows selected ile to besent via email and Bluetooth

File

New Folder Allows you to make anew older

MarkUnmark Allows you to mark or unmamk the chosen ile

Delete all Deletes all the ilesSort by You can sort the iles byname date and type

External memory Menu 26

This unction shows the status o the external microSDtradecard memory

M e d i a

GamesampApps

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3789

33

pp

G a m e s amp A p p

s

Games Menu 31

Note The JAR ile is a compressedormat o the Java program andthe JAD ile is a description ile thatincludes all detailed inormationFrom the network prior todownload you can view all detailedile descriptions rom the JAD ile

WARNING Only J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition)based programs will run in aphone environment

J2SE (Java 2 Standard Edition)based programs will only run in

a PC environmentDownload Games This menuoption connects to Fidorsquos gamedownload site

You can see the deault anddownloaded games in the list

Applications Menu 32

This menu displays the list o Javaprograms downloaded usingWAP All previously downloadedprograms can be selected deletedor viewed in detail within theApplication menu

Get New Apps

MobileMail

Network profile Menu 33To download a game you can setthe value to connect to the network using Network proile

Call History

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3889

LG TE365F | User Guide34

C a l l H i s t or y

All calls Menu 41

Allows you to view all o missedreceived and dialed call records

Missed calls Menu 42

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Dialled calls Menu 43

bull View the number i available and

call it or save it in the Contactbull Enter a new name or the number

and save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using this

numberbull Delete the call rom the list

Received calls Menu 44

bull View the number i available andcall it or save it in the Contact

bull Enter a new name or the numberand save both in the Contact

bull Send a message using thisnumber

bull Delete the call rom the list

Internet

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 3989

35

I n t er n e

t

This menu shows how to access

the Internet by launching the WAPbrowser

Note Check the availability o WAP services and pricing with yournetwork operator andor the serviceprovider whose service you wish touse Service providers will also giveyou instructions on how to use theirservices

Once connected the homepage isdisplayed The content depends onthe service provider

To exit the browser at any timepress the [END] key and tap [Yes]

The idle screen is displayed

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4089

LG TE365F | User Guide36

M e s s a g e s

Messages

Your TE365F includes unctionsrelated to SMS (Short MessageService) MMS (Multimedia MessageService) and email as well as thenetworkrsquos service messages Simplypress and select Messages

Sending a message

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and choose New

message Or a quicker way is topress right sot key to go ShortcutMenu

2 Choose Message to send an SMS

or MMS

3 A new message editor will open

Message editor combines SMSand MMS into one intuitiveand easy to switch betweenmode The deault setting o themessage editor is SMS mode

4 Enter your message using thekeypad See page 22 38 or moreinormation on how to enter text

5 Select Options and choose Insert

to add an Image Sound VideoSymbol Text template EmoticonName amp Number New slideSubject or More (ContactMybusiness cardSchedule)

6 Choose Send to7 Enter the phone number or press

Options and select Contacts or Recent list to open your

contacts list You can add multiplecontacts

8 Select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4189

M e s s a g e s

37

WARNING I an ImageSound Video New slide or Subject is added to themessage editor it will beautomatically converted to MMS

mode and you will be chargedaccordingly

Entering text

You can enter alphanumericcharacters using the phonersquoskeypad For example storing namesin Contacts writing a message andcreating scheduling events in the

calendar all require entering textThe ollowing text input methodsare available in the phone ABCmanual mode and 123 mode

Note Some ields may allow only

one text input mode (eg telephonenumber in address book ields)

To input a symbol in the text entryield press the key and select asymbol then select OKScroll using the navigation keys toshow more symbol options

Complete each word with a spaceby pressing

To delete a character press key

Fn key

Once Number mode

Twice Fn lock mode to keep using

Number mode

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4289

LG TE365F | User Guide38

M e s s a g e s

Text input mode using the

keypadWhen you are required to entertext or example when writing amessage the keypad will deaultto Abc mode I you are entering anumber or example when makingcall the keypad number keys willdeault to numbers

In ABC mode you can enter

numbers by irst pressing andthen the number you require

To change the Text Entry Modepress the [Options] - [Text EntryMode] and choose the text mode

you want

Message folders

Press Menu or selectMessages The older structureused on your TE365F is airly sel-explanatory

Inbox All the messages youreceived are placed into your InboxFrom here you can reply orwardand more see below or details

Drafts I you donrsquot have time to

inish writing a message you cansave what you have done so arhere

Outbox This is a temporary storageolder while messages are beingsent

Sent All the messages you sent areplaced into your Sent older

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4389

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4489

LG TE365F | User Guide40

M e s s a g e s

CopyMove Choose copy or

move the selected message tothe SIM card or phone

Multi delete Delete selectedmessages

Delete all read All openedmessages will be deleted

Delete all Delete text messagesmultimedia messages or allmessages

I you see the message No space forSIM message you should deletesome messages rom your inbox

I you see the message No space

for messages you can delete eithermessages or saved iles to releasespace

Using templates

You can create templates or theText and Multimedia messagesyou send most requently There aresome templates already on yourphone which can be edit i youwish

1 Press Menu or selectMessages and chooseTemplates

2 Choose Text or MultimediaYou can then select Options andchoose Edit to change existingtemplates to add New template or to Delete templates

3 To send a template select theone you want to send chooseOptions and select Send via

4 Choose how you would like to

send the template as a MessageBluetooth message or Email

5 Choose a contact and selectSend

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4589

M e s s a g e s

41

Changing your text message

settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do this using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Text message You can makechanges to

Message type Convert your textinto Voice Fax Paging X400 Emailor ERMES

Validity period Choose howlong your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to receive

conirmation that your message wasdelivered

Reply charging Choose to be

billed or your message recipientrsquosreply

Message centre number Enter thedetails or your message centre

Character encoding Choose howyour characters are encoded Thisimpacts the size o your messageand thereore data charges

Send long text as Choose whether

to send your message as SMS orMMS when you enter a text longerthan 2 pages in the message ield

Bearer setting Choose whetherto send your messages via GSM or

GPRS

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4689

LG TE365F | User Guide42

M e s s a g e s

Changing your multimedia

message settingsYour TE365F message settings arepre-deined so that you can sendmessages immediately

I you would like to change thesettings you can do so using theSettings options

Press Menu or selectMessages then choose Settings

and Multimedia messageYou can make changes to

Slide duration Choose how longyour slides appear on screen

Priority Choose the priority level o your multimedia message

Validity period Choose how

long your message is stored at themessage centre

Delivery report Choose to requesta delivery report andor allowreport

Read report Choose to send a readreport andor allow report

Auto download Choose toautomatically or manually

download multimedia messagesdepending on whether you are athome or roaming

Network profiles Select anoperator speciic network proile or

sending multimedia messages

Permitted message type Selectwhich type o multimedia messagesto allow

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4789

Messages

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4889

LG TE365F | User Guide44

M e s s a g e s

Info messages

Ino service messages are textmessages delivered by thenetwork to GSM They providegeneral inormation such asweather reports traic news taxispharmacies and stock prices

Each type o ino message has anumber and you can contact theservice provider whenever the

speciic number is introduced thenthe inormation can be received

When you have received an inoservice message you can see thepopup message to show you that

you have received a message orthe ino service message is directlydisplayed

When you have received an ino

service message and select Readto view the message it will bedisplayed on the screen

P l T f i i i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 4989

T o ol s

45

MP3 player Menu 71

Your LG TE365F has a built-in MP3player so you can play all youravourite music

To access the MP3 player pressMenu or and select Tools thenMP3 player From here you haveaccess to

All songs Contains all o the songsyou have on your phone

My playlist Contains any playlistsyou have created as well asOn the go Recent songs andFavourite songs

Settings Adjust your musicsettings

Transferring music into your

phoneThe easiest way to transer musicinto your phone is via Bluetooth oryour sync cable To transer usingBluetooth

1 Make sure both devices haveBluetooth switched on and arevisible to one another

2 Select the music ile on the other

device and choose to send it viaBluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile should appear inAll songs

Pl i U i ti hil l i

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

46

Playing a song

1 Press Menu or and selectTools then choose MP3 player

2 Choose All songs then select thesong you want to play Select

3 Select to pause the song4 Select to skip to the next

song

5 Select to skip to the previoussong

6 Select to stop the music andreturn to the MP3 player menu

TIP To change the volumewhile listening to music use the

volume keys on the let side o your phone or the up and downnavigation keys

Using options while playing

musicSelect Options and choose rom

Minimise Hide the MP3 playerscreen so that you can continueusing your phone as normal whilemusic is playing

View playlist Look at the playlistyou are currently listening to

Search Search or a track rom the

list o songs on your phoneAdd to playlist Adds the currenttrack to a playlist

Set as Set the current track as yourRingtone

orMessage tone

Information You can viewinormation about the music ile youare listening to

Settings Change the Shule Play

mode or Equalizer settings

Creating a playlist Playing a playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5189

T o ol s

47

Creating a playlist

You can create your own playlists bychoosing a selection o songs romthe All songs older

1 Press and select Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Press New enter the playlistname and press Save

4 The New playlist older will show

Select all o the songs that youwould like to include in yourplaylist by scrolling to them andselecting

5 Select Save to store to theplaylist

Playing a playlist

1 Press Menu or and selectTools

2 Choose MP3 player then selectMy playlist

3 Select the playlist you would liketo play and select View thenselect

Editing a playlist

From time to time you may want toadd new songs or delete songs roma playlist

I you want to organise yourplaylists you can edit them using

the Options menu1 Press Menu or and select

Tools

2 Choose MP3 player then select

My playlist

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5289

Camera Menu 7 2 Before yoursquove taken your photo

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5389

T o ol s

49

Camera Menu 72

Taking a quick photo

1 Hold the camera key down onthe let side o the handset Thecamera viewinder will appear on

screen2 Holding the phone horizontally

point the lens towards the subjecto the photo

3 Position the phone so you can seethe subject o your photo

4 Press or press the camera keyall the way down to take a photo

Note You can also access the

camera menu rom the standbyscreen Go to Menu gt Tools gtCamera Select Camera to open theviewinder

Before you ve taken your photo

Press to access these options Self timer The sel-timer allows

you to set a delay ater the capturebutton is pressed Choose rom O3 seconds 5 seconds or 10 secondsGreat or that group photo you wantto be part o

Multi shot This enables youto take up to 9 shots automatically

in very quick succession great ortaking photos o moving objects orat sporting events

White balance The whitebalance ensures that any white in

your photo is realistic In order oryour camera to correctly adjustthe white balance you may needto determine the light conditionsChoose rom Auto DaylightIncandescent Cloudy Fluorescent or Night mode

Colour effect Choose rom Set as Select to open a

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5489

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

50

Colour effect Choose rom

our colour tone options O (normalcolour) Sepia Mono (black and white) or Negative

EV Turn macro mode on i youare taking a picture very close to the

image subject

After yoursquove taken your photo

Your captured photo will appearon the screen The name o the

image runs along the bottom o thescreen and you will see six optionsdisplayed on the let side o thescreen

OK Select to take another photostraight away Your current photowill be saved

New image Take anotherphoto straightaway Your current

photo will be saved

Set as Select to open a

sub menu to set your image asWallpaper or Picture ID

Send via Select to send thephoto as a Multimedia message or Online Album See page 36 orSending a message

Album Select to look at theother photos in your album Yourcurrent photo will be saved See

page 31 or Viewing your savedphotos

Delete Delete the photo you have just taken and conirm by selectingYes The viewinder will reappear

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or taking photos

Video camera Convert rom Changing the image size

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5589

T o ol s

51

Video camera Convert rom

camera mode to video cameramode

Display Choose Standard or Cleanmode

Resolution Choose one rom

320240 640480 1280960 and16001200

Quality Choose between NormalFine and Super fine The iner the

quality the sharper a photo will beThe ile size will increase as a resultwhich means you will be able tostore ewer photos in your memory

Shutter tone Select one o the

three shutter sounds (active only inCamera mode)

Save to Choose whether to saveyour photos to the phone memory

or to the external memoryReset settings Choose Yes to resetyour phone to the original camerasettings

Changing the image size

You can change the size o thephoto to save memory space Themore pixels the larger the ile sizewhich in turn means they take upmore o your memory I you want

to it more pictures on your phoneyou can alter the pixel number tomake the ile size smaller

1 Press Options and select

Resolution rom the toolbar2 Select a pixel value rom the our

numerical options (320x240640x480 1280x960 1600x1200)

3 Press OK to implement your

changes

Viewing your saved photos Note Picture ID can only be added

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5689

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

52

g y d p

1 You can access your saved photosrom within the camera modeand rom the standby screenFrom the viewinder simply pressAlbum From the standby screen

you should press Menu or then select Media and Images

2 Your gallery will appear on screen

3 Use the navigation keys to select

the photo you want to view andselect View to enlarge it

Setting a photo as Wallpaper orPicture ID

From your image Album use thenavigation keys to select an imageand choose Options and Set

as to use the selected image asWallpaper or Picture ID or one

o your contacts When you set thephoto as Picture ID you can choosewhich part o the photo to use

y

to contacts which saved to yourphone not your SIM

Shooting a quick video

1 Quickly press the camera key on

the let side o the handset2 Choose Video camera

3 Point the camera lens towards thesubject o the video

4 Press the camera key on thelet side o the handset to startrecording

5 REC will appear in the bottomright corner o the viewinder and

a timer will show the length o your video

6 To pause the video select Pause and resume by selecting Resume

7 Select Stop to stop recording

Note You can also access the Album Select to look at the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5789

T o ol s

53

Video camera rom the standbyscreen Press and selectTools gt Camera scroll down andselect Video camera to open theviewinder

After yoursquove shot your video

The name o the video runs alongthe bottom o the screen and sixoptions will be displayed on the let

side o the screenOK Select to record another videostraight away Your current videowill be saved

New video Select to shootanother video straight away Yourcurrent video will be saved

Play Select to play the videoyou have just recorded

Send via Select to send thevideo as a Send via Multimedia

message or Online Album Seepage 36 or Sending a message

Album Select to look at the

other video clips in your album Yourcurrent video clip will be saved Seepage 31 or Watching your saved

videos

Delete Delete the video you

have just recorded and conirm byselecting Yes The viewinder willreappear

Getting to know the viewfinder

Note You can adjust the zoomusing the volume keys on the letside o the phone

Using the quick settings

Select Options to access the quick settings options These includevarious options or recording videos

Camera Convert rom video

camera mode to still camera modeDisplay Choose Standard or Cleanmode

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5889

FM radio Menu 73 3 Select Pause to pause the

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 5989

T o ol s

55

Using the FM radio

Your LG TE365F has an FM radioeature so you can tune in to youravourite stations to listen on the

moveNote You need to insert yourheadset in order to listen to theradio Insert the plug into theheadset socket (this is the same

socket that you plug your charger)

Voice recorder Menu 74

Using the voice recorder

Use your Voice recorder to recordvoice memos or other sounds

Recording your voice memo

1 Press Menu or and select

Tools then choose Voicerecorder

2 Press to begin recording

recording4 Select Stop to end the recording

5 Select to listen to the recording

Note You can listen to all o thevoice recordings you have saved byselecting Album

Sending a voice recording

1 Once you have inished recordingselect Options

2 Select Send via and chooserom Multimedia message or Bluetooth I you chooseMessage the recording will be

added to the message and youcan write and send it as normalI you choose Bluetooth you willbe prompted to turn Bluetoothon

TIP I you plan to send your5 Scroll down and choose whether

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6089

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

56

TIP I you plan to send your

recording as a message beoreyou start recording selectOptions select Recording

mode and choose MMS Thiswill ensure that the recordingits into a message

Alarm clock Menu 75

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Alarm clock

2 Select New

3 Scroll down and enter the time

you would like the alarm to soundat

4 Choose the repeat type toindicate whether you would like

your alarm to sound Once DailyMon - Fri Mon - Sat Sat - Sun orChoose weekday

you would like the alarm toAlways sound Always vibrate orFollow profile

6 Scroll down to choose the alarmtone Choose Sounds to select a

new sound7 Scroll down and enter a name or

the alarm or keep the suggestedname

8 Select SaveNote You can set up to 5 alarms

Calendar Menu 76

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Calendar

2 Select the event you would like toshare and choose Options

The ollowing [Options] are available Delete old Deletes the old

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6189

T o ol s

57

when a Calendar event is selectedrom the Calendar menu

Edit Allows you to edit theschedules

Delete Allows you to delete the

selected schedule

New schedule Allows you to makenew schedule

Send via Send throught

Text message Multimedia messageor Bluetooth

Calendar Back to the calendarmenu

Scheduler tone Choose theschedule alarming tone

All schedules Shows you all theschedules set on

Go to date Allows you to jump to

speciic dateMulti delete You can delete all thechosen items at once

schedulesDelete all Deletes all the schedules

Memo Menu 77

1 From the standby screen press

Menu or and select Toolsthen Memo

2 Select New and type your memo

3 Select Options then Save

4 Your memo will appear on screenthe next time you open thememo application

TIP You can edit an existing

memo Select the one you wantto edit press Options and selectEdit

Calculator Menu 78 Stopwatch Menu 79

Tools

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6289

LG TE365F | User Guide

T o ol s

58

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Calculator

2 Press the numeric keys to inputnumbers

3 For simple calculations select thefunction you require (+ ndash times divide)ollowed by =

4 For more complex calculations

select Function to select acommand

5 Select Clear to clear the screenand start a new calculation

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Stopwatch

2 Select Start to begin the timer

Choose Lap i want to record alap time Up to 20 lap times canbe saved

4 Select Stop to end the timer

5 Choose Resume to restart the

stopwatch at the time youstopped it at or select Reset toreturn to zero

Unit converter Menu 70 World clock Menu 7

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6389

T o ol s

59

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen Unit converter

2 Choose whether you would like toconvert Currency Area LengthWeight Temperature Volume or Velocity

3 Scroll up to choose rom the unito measurement you want to

enter Scroll let and right to selecta unit then scroll down and enterthe unit quantity

4 Scroll down to the unitconversion box and choose the

unit measurement you want toconvert into The conversion willshow automatically in the linebelow

1 From the standby screen pressMenu or and select Toolsthen World clock

2 Scroll up down let or right tonavigate the globe and choose acontinent

3 Select Zoom in to zoom into anarea and choose rom the cities inthat area

4 Press Set

Contacts

Search Menu 81 Groups Menu 84

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6489

LG TE365F | User Guide60

Instant searching is available byinputting the initial letter o thename Enter the name that youwant to search

New contact Menu 82This menu allows you to add anew contact address You canenter contact address inormationincluding name phone numbers

email addresses group inormationitems memos ring tones andimages (photographs)

Speed dials Menu 83

This menu allows you to conigurethe speed dial numbers You canselect a number rom 2 to 9 asa speed dial You can conigure

speed dial numbers or any o the8 numbers or a speciic contactaddress so that a contact addressmay have multiple speed dialnumbers

This menu allows you to managegroup inormation By deaultthere are 7 groups Family FriendsColleague VIP Group1 Group2 andNo group You can also conigure

a ring tone or a group so that thegroup ring tone sounds when acall rom a speciic contact addresswithin that group is received andthere is no ring tone conigured orthe speciic contact address

Copy all Menu 85

You can copy entries rom SIM cardmemory to Phone memory and viceversa

SIM to phone You can copy theentry rom SIM Card to Phonememory

Phone to SIM You can copy theentry rom Phone memory to SIMCard

C on t a c t s

Delete all Menu 86 Business card This option allows

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6589

61

You can delete all entries rom SIMor Phone

Settings Menu 87

View options

Name and number Set thephonebook list with displayingname and number

With picture Set the phonebook

list with the inormation o characterand picture

Information Menu 88

Service dial numbers Use this

unction to access a particular list o services provided by your network operator (i supported by the SIMcard)

Own number (Depending on the

SIM) You can save and check yourown number in SIM card

you to create your own businesscard eaturing Name and a mobilephone number

C on t a c t s

Settings

Within this older you can adapt 3 For the Silent and Vibrate

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6689

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

62

your settings to make your TE365Fpersonal to you

Note For inormation on callsettings see page 20

Changing your profilesYou can quickly change your proilerom the standby screen Simplypress using the navigation keysthen the proile you would like to

activate Choose rom GeneralSilent Vibrate only Outdoor andHeadset

Personalizing your profiles

You can personalise each proilesetting

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings and then Profile

2 Choose the proile you want andselect Personalize

only proiles you can adapt thevibration For the other proilesyou can change all o the soundsand alert options available in thelist

Changing your date amp time

You can set unctions relating to thedate and time

1 Press Menu or and select

Settings2 Select Date amp Time and choose

rom the list below

Set date You can enter the current

dateDate format You can set the dateormat (YYYYMMDD DDMMYYYY MMDDYYYY)

Set time You can enter the current

time

Time format You can set the timeTIP The longer the backlight

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6789

S e t t i n g s

63

ormat to either 24 hours or 12hours

Auto update Select On the phonewill automatically update the dateand time

Changing the language

Select Languages to change thelanguage or any text in your phoneAny change will also alter the

language input mode

Changing your display settings

1 Press Menu or and selectSettings

2 Select Display and choose romWallpaper Choose a wallpaper toappear on your screen display

Clocks Choose to have the time

and date visible on your standbyscreen Choose rom No date amp

time or Normal

Backlight timer Choose how longthe backlight remains on

is on the more battery poweris used and you may need tocharge your phone more oten

Brightness Use the navigation keysto adjust the brightness Chooserom 40 60 80 or 100 thenselect OK to save your change

Shortcut Allows you to set

navigation keys as you likeHome screen shortcut Select Onto display the shortcuts o 4 menusas pictures on the middle o thestandby screen

Font size Change the ont size o the ollowing Menu Dialing andMessaging

Theme Quickly change the whole

look o your screenMenu style Change the menu viewrom Grid view to List view

Main font style Adjust the ont Network Your TE365F connects

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6889

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

64

typeDialing font style Adjust the ontstyle or when you are dialing aphone number

Standby text Choose to add a

message to your standby screen

Changing your connectivitysettings

Your connectivity settings have

already been set up by yournetwork operator so you can startyour new phone rom the o I youwant to change any settings usethis menu

Press Menu gt Settings and andselect Connectivity Your optionsare

Bluetooth Set up your TE365F or

Bluetooth use You can adapt yourvisibility to other devices or searchthrough devices your phone ispaired with

automatically to your preerrednetwork To change these settingsby using this menu You can alsoadd new access points by using thismenu

USB connection Choose Dataservice and synchronise yourTE365F using the LG PC Suitesotware to copy iles rom yourphone I you have a memory card

inserted select Mass storage to useyour phone in the same way as youwould use a USB stick Connect toyour computer and drag and dropiles to the TE365F removable deviceolder

Changing your Bluetooth settings

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then choose

Bluetooth

2 Choose Bluetooth settingsMake your changes to

My visibility Choose whether Phone lock Choose a security

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 6989

S e t t i n g s

65

to Show or Hide your device toothers

My name Enter a name or yourLG TE365F

My address View your Bluetooth

address

Changing your security settings

Change your security settings tokeep your TE365F and the important

inormation it holds protected1 Press Menu or and select

Settings

2 Select Security and choose rom

the list belowPIN code request Choose a PINcode to be requested when youturn your phone on

Auto key lock Choose how long

beore the keypad locks when thephone is not in use

code to lock your phone Whenpower on When SIM changed orImmediately

Change codes Change yourSecurity code PIN1 code or PIN2

code

Using flight mode

Use this unction to switch thelight mode On or Off You will not

be able to make calls connect tothe internet send messages whenFlight mode is switched On

Using power save

Choose to switch the power savingsettings Always on Night only andO

Resetting your phone

Use Reset in Phone settings toreset all the settings to the actorydeinitions You need the securitycode to activate this unction

Viewing memory status Phone Information

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7089

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

66

Your TE365F has three memoriesavailable the phone the SIM cardand an external memory card (youmay need to purchase the memorycard separately)

You can use the memory managerto determine how each memory isused and see how much space isavailable

Press Menu or and selectSettings Choose Memory statusand you will then see the currentstatus o the memories (CommonReserved SIM card and External

memory) in your TE365F

TIP See page 17 or inormationon inserting a memory card

It shows the phone inormationsuch as My Number ManuacturerModel Name Device ID HardwareVersion Sotware Version andLanguage

Pairing with another Bluetoothdevice

By pairing your TE365F and anotherdevice you can set up a passcode

protected connection This meansyour pairing is more secure

1 Check your Bluetooth is On and Visible You can changeyour visibility in the Bluetooth

settings menu by selecting My

visibility then Show

2 Select Device list rom theBluetooth menu and choose New

3 Your TE365F will search ordevices When the search iscompleted Pair and Refresh willappear on screen

4 Choose the device you want to

i i h lPair

d

Using your phone as a massstorage device

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7189

S e t t i n g s

67

pair with select and enter apasscode then choose OK

5 Your phone will then connect tothe other device on which youshould enter the same passcode

6 Your passcode protectedBluetooth connection is nowready

Using a Bluetooth headset

1 Check your Bluetooth is On andVisible

2 Follow the instructions that camewith your headset to place it

in pairing mode and pair yourdevices

3 Your TE365F will thenautomatically connect to yourBluetooth headset and switch to

headset proile

Your TE365F can be used as amass storage device just like aUSB memory stick This is a greatway o moving your iles rom

your computer to your phone I yoursquove inserted a memory cardwhen connecting as Mass storagethe phone will be displayed astwo drives on your computer the

handset memory and externalmemory

1 Press Menu or select Settings and then Connectivity

2 Select USB Connection3 Scroll to Mass storage and select

OK

4 Insert the smaller end o the

USB bl i t th USB bl

Transferring a file to your phone

Y l t il

Settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7289

LG TE365F | User Guide

S e t t i n g s

68

USB cable into the USB cableconnector on the edge o theTE365F Plug the larger end intothe USB port o your computer

5 A removable disk older will open

automatically on your computertwo disk olders i you have amemory card inserted showingall the olders on your phone ormemory card

6 Drag and drop your imagesvideos music or documents intothe removable disk olders

7 Saely remove your phone by

clicking on the Safely removehardware icon in your desktoptoolbar

8 When you want to then access aile or example an image press

Menu or then select Media ollowed by External memory then Images All the images youtranser will be contained in thisile

You can also transer iles rom yourcomputer to your phone usingBluetooth

1 Make sure your phone andcomputer have Bluetooth

switched on and are visible to oneto another

2 Use your computer to send theile via Bluetooth

3 When the ile is sent you will haveto accept it on your phone byselecting Yes

4 The ile will be saved within theappropriate older depending on

type For example photographswill be saved in the Images olderand music in the Sounds olderI your phone cannot identiy theile type the ile will be saved inthe Others older

Note Files sent using Bluetooth willbe saved to the phone memory

To switch Bluetooth on

1 Press Menu or and select

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7389

S e t t i n g s

69

Sending and receiving your filesusing Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a great way to send andreceive iles as no wires are neededand connection is quick and easyYou can also connect to a Bluetoothheadset to dial and receive calls

Beore you start sharing iles using

Bluetooth you will need to pairyour phone with another Bluetoothdevice For inormation on pairingdevices see Pairing with another

Bluetooth device on page 66

1 Press Menu or and selectConnectivity then chooseBluetooth

2 Select Bluetooth onoff andchoose On

3 Select Off to switch Bluetooth o

To send a file

1 Open the ile you want to sendtypically this will be a photo

video or music ile2 Select Options and choose Send

via then Bluetooth

3 Select Yes to turn Bluetooth on i

it is not already activated4 Your TE365F will automatically

search or other Bluetoothenabled devices within a range

5 Choose the device you want to

send the ile and select Send

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7489

Fido IM

The Instant Messages eature canonly be used with the supporto the net ork operator or

Offline Menu

Sign in

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7589

71

F i d oI M

o the network operator orcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger For InstantMessages users a valid User ID and

Password will be required in orderto login and exchange messages aswell as checking the online status

The menu items below might notappear since not all IM communities

support the various options Alsothe menu strings may appeardierently based on the selected IMcommunities The keywords such asUser ID Login and Contact will beused as general terms in IM menusaccording to the currently selectedcommunities such as Windows Liveand Yahoo Messenger

Sign inThis allows users to login by illing inthe User ID and Password

Note Once the User ID and

Password are saved you will notbe required to type them in againduring Login process This eature isan optional

Saved ConversationsThis is where a user can view savedconversations

Change Provider You can changethe provider

Settings

Set Sound Allows you to set ono an alert or the Contact when theyhave an activity on their session

Default Provider Allows you to setthe deault IM community to login

Auto Sign In You may set theautomatic IM Login process bychoosing between the rsquoWhen power

When cursor is located on aConversations List

N t Th C ti Li t

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7689

LG TE365F | User Guide72

choosing between the When poweronrsquo or rsquoWhen IM startrsquo options

Network You may check your IMNetwork Proiles or Server Address

inormation

IM Information

This indicates the Instant MessagesClient Inormation such as Client

Name and Version Number

Online Menu 1 to 1conversation

Ater a successul Login a list o

contacts with Screen Names will beappeared on screen Depending onthe cursor location in the contactsthe ollowing menu options will beavailable

Note The Conversations Listcontains both the active contactwhere a conversation has takenplace as well as an unknown

contactWhen you select on theConversation List it oers the abilityto view or hide conversations

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a messageto an unknown contact Whenselected a User ID must be typedin prior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations Youmay view or delete the storedconversation session

F i d oI M

Settings

bull Display Name

When cursor is located on aConversation

End Conversation This closes

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7789

73

Display Namebull My Status Allows you to set your

status to Busy Be Right BackAway On The Phone Out To Lunchor Appear Oline

bull Set Sound Allows you to set analert or the Contact when theyhave the activity on their session

bull Auto Sign In You may Login to

an IM client automatically with thelsquoWhen power onrsquo or lsquoWhen IM startrsquooptions

bull Default Provider Allows you toset the deault IM community to

loginbull Sign Out This begins the Logout

process

End Conversation This closesthe selected conversation I anunknown contact was selected thatcontact is deleted

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsyou to blockunblock the selectedConversations Contact

Contact Info This allows you toview the User ID and Status Textinormation

Refresh contact This rereshes thepresent inormation on the contactswithin the contacts

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minimize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the LogoutprocessF i d oI M

When cursor is located on aContact List

Add Contact This adds a new

When cursor is located on aContact

Add Contact This adds a new

Fido IM

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7889

LG TE365F | User Guide74

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contactsrsquo listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameRefresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on thecontacts within the contacts

Send Message to This oersthe ability to send a message to anunknown contact When selectedthe User ID must be typed inprior to starting an IM session or

conversationSaved Conversations This is wherea user can view saved conversations

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Add Contact This adds a newcontact to the selected contacts listin the meantime this searches orthe contact on the basis o E-mail

Address First Name or Last NameDelete Contact This deletes theselected Contact

BlockUnblock Contact This allowsor blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Refresh Contact List This rereshesthe present inormation on theselected contact

Contact Info This allows you toview inormation It provides UserID Status Text

Blocked List

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Minumize Minimize the activewindow

F i d oI M

Sign Out This begins the Logoutprocess

Note

bull Maximum number o characterssupported by a message is 800

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 7989

75

Menu options available in theConversation screen

Back To Contacts This brings thescreen back to the contacts

Insert You can insert SymbolTemplate and Emoticons in theconversation screen

BlockUnblock Contact This allows

or blocks conversation with theselected Contact

Save Conversation Stores thecurrently active conversation

End Conversation This ends theactive conversation and clears theconversation buer

Settings Please reer to theprevious Settings Menu

Text Entry Mode Sets the textinput mode such as abc Abc ABCand 123

supported by a message is 800characters or receiving and 127characters or sending

bull The present inormation might not

update in real time so the ldquoRereshListrdquoldquoReresh Contactrdquo option canbe used or the most up to datestatus

F i d oI M

MobileMail

Mobile Email allows you to access

Fido Yahoo Yahoo Mail Windows

Live Hotmail and Other providers

Quick Tip Your password is casesensitive Press the button onthe keypad to change to lower case

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8089

LG TE365F | User Guide76

M o b i l eM a i l

e ot a a d Ot e p o de s

accounts on your phone So now

you can quickly and easily check your

email while you are away rom your

computer

To Set Up Mobile Email

Open Mobile Email From the

Standby screen press the let sot

key or press ok key Then chooseMobileMail

Select an Email Provider Use thenavigation key to highlight theemail provider you wish to use andpress Select

Log In

1 Type your existing email ID into ID

entry ield

2 Then enter your password intothe Password ield

t e eypad to c a ge to o e caseor upper case

3 Select Sign In

Opening an Email Just scroll down

and highlight the email subject lineyou want to open and press OK key When the email is open selectOptions to Reply Delete Reply toAll Forward View All Recipients or

Mark Unread

Deleting an Email Scroll down tothe email you want to delete pressOptions then Delete

The Friends link is the one place tostay connected to all your onlinecommunities through your phone

Communities

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8189

77

C omm uni t i e s

g y pEasily access Facebook MySpaceYahoo and Windows Live

PC Sync

You can synchronise your PC withyour phone to make sure all yourimportant details and dates match

5 Follow the instructions on thescreen to complete the LG PC

Suite Installer wizard

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8289

LG TE365F | User Guide78

P C S y n c

and also as a backup to put yourmind at ease

Installing LG PC Suite onyour computer

1 From the standby screen pressand choose Settings

2 Select Connection then select

USB connection modeMusic Music Sync mode

Others Data Service mode

3 Insert the supplied CD into your

PC Click on the LG PC SuiteInstaller which will appear onyour screen

4 Select the language you wouldlike the installer to run in and click

LG PC Suite

6 Once installation is complete theLG PC Suite icon will appear onyour desktop

Connecting your phone andPC

1 Connect the USB cable to yourphone and your PC

2 Double click on the LG PC SuiteIcon on your desktop

3 Click on Connection Wizard andUSB

4 Click on Next then Next againand Finish Your phone and PCare now connected

Viewing your phone files on

your PC1 Connect your phone to your PC as

Synchronising your contacts

1 Connect your phone to your PC2 Click on the Contacts icon

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8389

79

P C S y n c

1 Connect your phone to your PC asoutlined above

2 Click on the Contents icon

3 All o the videos audios and

graphics you have saved ontoyour phone will be displayed onthe screen in the LG Phone older

TIP Viewing the contents o

your phone on your PC helpsyou to arrange iles removecontents you no longer need

2 Click on the Contacts icon

3 Select To Phone Your PC willexport your changes to yourhandset

4 Click on File and select Save Youcan now select where you wouldlike to save your contacts to

Note To backup contacts saved

to your USIM card click on the SIMcard older on the let side o yourPC screen Right-click your contactthen Select all Right-click yourcontact again and select Copy to

Phone Memory Now click on theHandset older on the let o yourscreen and all your numbers will bedisplayed

Synchronising your

messages1 Insert MicroSD card and connect

Note The ollowing conditionsmust be met

Microsot Windows XP or Vista

PC Sync

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8489

LG TE365F | User Guide80

your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Messages icon

3 All o your PC and phone

messages will be displayed inolders on your screen

4 Use the tool bar at the top o your screen to edit and rearrange

messages

Synchronising your music

1 Connect your phone to your PC

2 Click on the Music icon

3 The music iles you have savedwill be displayed on the screen inthe Music older

Windows Media Player 11 orhigher

USB Connection mode should

be active and Music Sync modeshould be on

Using your phone as a massstorage device

Your phone can only be used as amass storage device i you have amemory card inserted

1 Disconnect your phone rom your

PC2 From the standby screen press

and choose Settings

3 Select Connection then selectUSB connection mode

4 Highlight Mass storage and pressSetP

C S y n c

5 Connect your phone to your PCYour phone will read Connecting

as Mass Storagehellip ollowed by

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8589

81

Connected as Mass Storage

Mode Do not disconnect duringtranser

6 All o your phone iles willautomatically be stored onto yourPC hard drive

Note Your phone must beunplugged rom your PC to initiate

Mass Storage

Note Mass storage backs upcontent saved on your memory cardonly not your handset memory

To transer the contents o yourhandset memory (eg contacts)yoursquoll need to synchronise usingPC Sync

P C S y n c

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8689

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8789

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8889

Message Possible causes Possible Corrective measures

Phone cannot

OnO key pressed toobriely

Press OnO key or at least twoseconds

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings

862019 User Guide 1689

httpslidepdfcomreaderfulluser-guide-1689 8989

85

T r o u b l e S h o o t i n g

Phone cannotbe switched on

briely

Battery empty

Battery contacts dirty

Charge battery Check chargingindicator in the display

Clean contacts

Charging error

Battery totally emptyTemperature out o range

Contact problem

No mains voltage

Charger deective

Wrong charger

Battery deective

Charge batteryMake sure the ambient temperatureis right wait or a while and thencharge again

Check power supply and connection

to the phone Check the batterycontacts clean them i necessary

Plug in to a dierent socket or check voltage

I the charger does not warm upreplace it

Only use original LG accessories

Replace battery

Phone losesnetwork

Signal too weak Reconnection to another serviceprovider is automatic

Number notpermitted

The Fixed dial numberunction is on

Check settings